Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident
or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your FIAT brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used under
license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC
2023 OWNER’S MANUAL
moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum.
If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-888-242-6342 OR VISIT FIAT.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................6
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................52
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................68
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................106
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................158
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...................................................................................................200
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................216
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................268
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................273
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................280
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY .......................................................................7
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........................ 7
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................12
Key Fob ....................................................................... 12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................14
IGNITION SWITCH ..............................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................................16
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 16
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 17
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 17
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 17
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer And
Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped....................... 17
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped........... 18
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................18
To Arm The System .................................................... 18
To Disarm The System ............................................... 18
Disabling...................................................................... 18
Security System Manual Override.............................. 19
DOORS .................................................................................19
Manual Door Locks......................................................19
Power Door Locks........................................................19
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped).................................................................20
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........................21
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ................................21
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....21
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................................22
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column.................22
SEATS ..................................................................................23
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ..............................23
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................24
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................25
Head Restraints ..........................................................25
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .....................................27
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................27
Get Started...................................................................27
Basic Voice Commands...............................................27
Additional Information.................................................27
MIRRORS ............................................................................28
Automatic Dimming Mirror..........................................28
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ..................28
Outside Mirrors ...........................................................28
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped........28
Power Mirrors...............................................................29
Folding Mirror...............................................................29
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ....................................29
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................. 29
Headlight Switch ......................................................... 29
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped ......... 30
High Beams ................................................................. 30
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped................................................................... 30
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 30
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 30
Parking Lights.............................................................. 30
Headlight Time Delay ................................................. 30
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 31
Turn Signals ................................................................ 31
Lane Change Assist .................................................... 31
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights .......................... 31
INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 32
Front Courtesy Light.................................................... 32
Cargo Area Lights ........................................................ 33
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................... 33
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................................... 33
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 34
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................................... 35
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ................... 35
CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................... 35
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions — If Equipped ...................................... 35
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions — If Equipped ............................................. 38
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 40
Climate Voice Recognition.......................................... 40
Operating Tips ............................................................ 40
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................42
Storage ........................................................................ 42
USB/Media Player Control ......................................... 43
Power Outlets ............................................................. 44
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ....................................... 44
Ashtray — If Equipped ................................................. 44
Grab Handles .............................................................. 45
WINDOWS............................................................................45
Power Window Controls.............................................. 45
POWER FOLDING ROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........................46
Opening The Power Folding Roof............................... 47
Closing The Power Roof.............................................. 47
Power Roof Maintenance ........................................... 47
Ignition Off Operation.................................................. 47
Relearn Procedure...................................................... 48
HOOD....................................................................................48
To Open The Hood ...................................................... 48
To Close The Hood ...................................................... 49
LIFTGATE..............................................................................49
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..................................... 49
Lock/Close The Liftgate.............................................. 50
Cargo Area Features ................................................... 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
b
...............................................52
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................................ 53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................................53
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons.............. 54
Engine Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
b
.............. 54
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu..................... 55
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................58
Red Warning Lights .....................................................58
Yellow Warning Lights .................................................60
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................64
Green Indicator Lights.................................................64
White Indicator Lights..................................................65
Blue Indicator Lights....................................................65
Gray Indicator Lights ...................................................65
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....................66
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...............................................................66
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................................67
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .....................................................68
Tip Start Feature .........................................................68
Cold Weather Operation .............................................68
Extended Park Starting ...............................................68
If Engine Fails To Start ...............................................69
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine...................69
Stopping The Engine....................................................69
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped..................69
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................69
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) .........................................70
Auto Park Brake...........................................................71
SafeHold.......................................................................71
Brake Service Mode ....................................................72
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................................... 72
Gear Selector............................................................... 73
Gear Ranges................................................................ 73
Transmission Limp Home Mode................................. 76
Ignition Park Interlock................................................. 76
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System.... 76
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 76
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED .............................. 76
Warning Messages...................................................... 77
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ........................................... 77
STOP/START SYSTEM........................................................ 77
Automatic Mode .......................................................... 77
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.... 78
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode............ 78
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System............ 78
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System............ 79
System Malfunction .................................................... 79
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 79
Cruise Control.............................................................. 79
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................... 80
FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ................. 87
Park Assist Sensors..................................................... 88
Park Assist Warning Display ....................................... 88
Park Assist Display...................................................... 88
Enabling And Disabling Park Assist............................ 91
Service The Park Assist System ................................. 91
Cleaning The Park Assist System ............................... 91
Park Assist System Usage Precautions ..................... 91
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ............................................ 92
LaneSense Operation ................................................. 92
Turning LaneSense On Or Off..................................... 92
LaneSense Warning Message.................................... 93
Changing LaneSense Status ...................................... 94
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............................. 95
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .................................................96
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................................96
Certification Label....................................................... 96
TRAILER TOWING ...............................................................97
Common Towing Definitions ...................................... 97
Trailer Hitch Classification.......................................... 99
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .......................................................... 99
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................................100
Towing Requirements .............................................. 100
Towing Tips................................................................102
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................................. 103
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ......... 103
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 104
Driving On Slippery Surfaces.................................... 104
Driving Through Water ............................................. 104
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................... 106
CYBERSECURITY .............................................................. 106
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................................... 106
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 107
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 122
System Overview ...................................................... 122
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............................................ 124
Safety And General Information .............................. 125
UCONNECT MODES.......................................................... 125
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................ 125
Radio Mode .............................................................. 126
Media Mode ............................................................. 134
Phone Mode ............................................................. 136
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 145
Android Auto™
b
.................................................... 145
Apple CarPlay®
b
.................................................. 147
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks.................................................................. 149
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 149
Navigation Main Menu............................................. 149
Navigating A Route ................................................... 151
Search ....................................................................... 151
Current Route ........................................................... 151
My Places .................................................................. 154
Parking ...................................................................... 155
Gas Stations.............................................................. 155
Settings ..................................................................... 155
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ................. 157
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 157
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES .......................................................... 158
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................ 158
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .................. 159
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...................................... 162
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ........... 162
Full Brake Control System With Mitigation -
If Equipped................................................................ 165
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
b
......... 169
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ............................... 171
Occupant Restraint Systems ................................... 171
Important Safety Precautions.................................. 171
Seat Belt Systems..................................................... 171
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).................. 177
Child Restraints ....................................................... 185
SAFETY TIPS......................................................................196
Transporting Passengers ..........................................196
Transporting Pets ......................................................196
Connected Vehicles...................................................196
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...............................................................197
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ..................................................198
Exhaust Gas ..............................................................199
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................................199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................................200
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ......................................200
Preparations For Jacking .........................................201
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped.................................................................201
Jacking Instructions .................................................202
SEMI–AUTO KIT ................................................................204
Description
b
..........................................................204
Inflation Procedure....................................................205
Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure.....................207
Sealant Cartridge Replacement ...............................208
JUMP STARTING ...............................................................208
Preparations For Jump Start.....................................208
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................................209
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ...........................................210
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................211
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..........................................211
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........................................212
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................................213
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ..................................213
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ..................................213
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................................................................. 215
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE .......................................... 216
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 217
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 222
1.3L Turbo Engine..................................................... 222
Checking Oil Level..................................................... 223
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................223
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................................223
Pressure Washing ..................................................... 224
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 224
Engine Oil .................................................................. 224
Engine Oil Filter ........................................................225
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 225
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 225
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 226
Body Lubrication ...................................................... 226
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................... 226
Exhaust System ........................................................ 228
Cooling System.......................................................... 228
Brake System ........................................................... 231
Automatic Transmission .......................................... 232
Fuses ......................................................................... 233
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 241
TIRES ................................................................................. 250
Tire Safety Information............................................. 250
Tires — General Information..................................... 257
Tire Types................................................................... 260
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................ 260
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ................................... 262
Snow Traction Devices ............................................ 263
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 264
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................................. 264
Treadwear ................................................................. 264
Traction Grades ........................................................ 265
Temperature Grades ................................................ 265
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 265
BODYWORK...................................................................... 265
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ..................... 265
Body And Underbody Maintenance......................... 266
Preserving The Bodywork......................................... 266
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 266
Seats And Fabric Parts............................................. 266
Plastic And Coated Parts.......................................... 267
Leather Surfaces ...................................................... 267
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 267
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 268
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 268
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ............. 268
Torque Specifications............................................... 268
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 269
1.3L Turbo Engine .................................................... 269
Reformulated Gasoline ........................................... 269
Materials Added To Fuel ......................................... 269
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ................................... 270
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ............ 270
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 270
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline..................................270
Fuel System Cautions ...............................................270
FLUID CAPACITIES ...........................................................271
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............................271
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................272
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................273
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................273
Prepare A List ............................................................273
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................273
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................273
Roadside Assistance.................................................273
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................274
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................274
Mexico........................................................................274
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........................275
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).....................................275
Service Contract .......................................................275
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................275
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................276
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................276
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........276
In Canada...................................................................276
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................276
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................277
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................279
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new FIAT® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented
documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining
its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important
warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that could
result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to
the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 58.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 58
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 58
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 59
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 59
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light
Ú page 59
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 59
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 60
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 60
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 60
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 60
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 60
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 60
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 60
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 60
Red Warning Lights
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 60
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 61
Audio System Failure Warning Light
Ú page 61
Drive Mode System Overheating Warning Light
Ú page 61
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 61
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 61
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 61
Exterior Light Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 61
Full Brake Control System Off Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 62
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light
Ú page 62
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 62
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 62
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 62
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 62
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 62
Yellow Warning Lights
1
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Service Warning Light
Ú page 62
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 63
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 63
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 63
Drowsiness Detected System Fault Warning Light
Ú page 61
Yellow Indicator Lights
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Full Brake Control System Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Yellow Warning Lights
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Green Indicator Lights
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 64
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Yellow Indicator Lights
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 64
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 65
White Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Green Indicator Lights
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 65
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light
Ú page 65
White Indicator Lights
1
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). In some
conditions, this distance can be reduced or increased.
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a metallic object, mobile phone,
laptop, wireless charging pad, or other electronic
device. This may result in poor performance.
If the key fob’s battery is near depletion, the key fob
performance can be reduced.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow
Ú page 277.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors
and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp (if programmed in the Uconnect system).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door is
opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and if
equipped, the security system will arm.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
1 — Unlock
2 — Emergency Key
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key
fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
and pulling the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of
the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new emer-
gency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine
off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the
engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check,
it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 277.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
positions. These positions are OFF, ON, and RUN.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
positions:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
No electrical devices are available.
ON
The vehicle is not running.
Some electrical devices (power locks, alarm, etc.) are
still available.
RUN
Driving mode.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.).
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located inside the
cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For more information on proper engine starting proce-
dures, see
Ú page 68.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear Selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with
another push and release of the Remote Start button on
the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire
15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.
See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in
the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort Menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 106. The vehicle will adjust the climate
control settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 35.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The climate control settings will change if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start
mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the
OFF button on the climate controls, which will turn the
system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER AND REAR DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or
exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Too Cold
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with the Dead Lock Device, and
the Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches for
door locks and liftgate release are disabled
Ú page 21.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 20.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 20.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during lift-
gate entry. If someone enters the vehicle through the
opened liftgate, then opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DISABLING
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the
emergency key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event of a
failure to the system or to switch off the alarm, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door from the inside, rotate the door lock
button on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
doors from the inside, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
NOTE:
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual door sepa-
rately.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
Push the lock button on the driver or passenger door trim
panel to lock the doors.
With the doors locked, push the unlock button to unlock
the doors.
Power Lock/Unlock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system
(if equipped).
1 — Door Unlocked
2 — Door Locked
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the key
from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 106.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Passive Entry system from locking and unlocking
the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry door
handle, and no door opens within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and if equipped, the Vehicle Security
system will arm.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle
will unlock all doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 106.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is ajar.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it detects
a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not
detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the
car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either front door handles, pushing the Passive
Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using any Passive Entry door handle. This is to allow
you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door
handle without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Activation/Deactivation Of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ can be activated or deactivated
through the instrument cluster display or through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 277.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When the auto door lock feature is enabled, if all of the
doors are closed properly, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled
within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
DEAD LOCK DEVICE — IF EQUIPPED
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents the
use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and the
power door lock switch. This device prevents the doors
from opening within the passenger compartment.
The device works on all doors.
Arming The Device
The device is armed after two pushes of the lock button
on the key fob
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the device
will also work by pushing the lock button on the driver’s
or passenger’s side exterior door handle
The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes of
the turn signals.
NOTE:
The device does not operate if one or more doors are
not properly closed.
Disarming The Device
The device will automatically disarm by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob
Placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the device
will also disarm by using the driver or passenger
Passive Entry door handle to unlock and open the door
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
lock button to the unlocked position, lower the window,
and open the door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual seats. The
seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The front driver seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback,
lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Folding Second Row Seat
The manual folding split rear seat increases the storage of
the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of
the rear seatbacks completely forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you
to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear
seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to
carry two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or
right rear seatback completely forward.
Seatback Release Lever
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat
to its proper position.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the
top edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks
properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock
on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no
longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches
are visible, the seatback is not secure.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
Rear Seat Latch
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat switches are located on the
instrument panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately
145 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE:
The timing may vary based on environmental tempera-
ture.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 17.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
WARNING!
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Front Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with driver and passenger head
restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
Rear Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head
restraints and one center head restraint for its rear
passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or
lowered. When the center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint recline the backrest of the
seat to avoid interference with the roof. Raise the head
restraint as far as it can go then push the release button
and adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the release button and adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The follwing basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 277.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, And Climate Functions
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
Automatic Dimming Button
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn the light off.
Vanity Mirror Light
Sun Visors Slide-On-Rod Feature
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door trim
panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection switch to
the left or to the right and then push the mirror adjustment
switch in the four directions indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
The power mirror switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Power Mirror Switch
FOLDING MIRROR
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full
rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 35.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, daytime
running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the
instrument cluster and interior lighting.
Headlight Switch
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument
cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.
NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position lights
and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the
headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) position.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled through
Uconnect Settings, will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and the park brake is not applied.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH BEAMS
To activate the high beam headlights, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle), and an
indicator will illuminate in the instrument cluster display.
To deactivate the high beam headlights, pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle).
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams to activate.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
(AUTO position) for automatic headlight operation.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START position
before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED, located
on the windshield. It detects changes in light intensity
outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of light set by
using the menu on the display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
external light required for controlling the lighting.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch to the first position to turn on
the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the cluster
will illuminate.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 106.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within two minutes. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two minutes of placing
the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Front Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the fog light button on
the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push
the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights
or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam head-
lights will turn off the fog lights.
The fog lights also function as cornering lights.
Therefore there will be times when only one light is on.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position with the fog
lights on, they will remain on when the ignition is placed
back in the ON/RUN position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, if the selector is moved to
the parking lights position and the front fog lights are
activated, the DRL will be deactivated and the front
parking lights will be activated. Once the front fog lights
are deactivated, the DRL will be activated again.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
five times then automatically turn off.
COURTESY LIGHTS/APPROACHING
L
IGHTS
The courtesy lights feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for
25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked. The courtesy
lights feature can be activated or deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with the
feature active, the activation of the lights is extended for
10 seconds. The feature is disabled when the vehicle is
locked or when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
FRONT COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy lights will automatically turn on when the
door is open or closed. The light switches in the overhead
console are for reading lamps.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Push the driver or passenger light switch to operate the
reading lamps individually.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
If a light is left on it will automatically be turned off after
approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in the
OFF position.
Dome Light Timing
The dome light will automatically illuminate when the
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the
doors are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will illumi-
nate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
When the doors are closed, the dome light will auto-
matically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
NOTE:
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
doors are locked.
The dome lights will automatically turn off after approx-
imately 15 minutes of inactivity to preserve the battery.
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following
conditions when the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the
key fob is removed from the vehicle.
The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
minutes).
After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
Dimmer Controls
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, lower instrument panel
lights, and cubby bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument
panel. At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer,
all the interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom
most setting of the thumb wheel, all the interior lights will
be turned to their lowest dimmable setting.
Headlight Switch
1 — Courtesy/Reading Lights
2 — Light Switches
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rear Dome Light — If Equipped
Push the switch on the rear dome light once to turn the
light on, the light will remain on at all times. Push the
switch a second time to turn the light off, the light will
remain off until a door is opened.
Rear Dome Light On/Off Switch
Retractable Roof Lights
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are
two interior lights located below the grab handles of the
rear doors.
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
CARGO AREA LIGHTS
An interior light is located on the left side panel in the
cargo area.
This light automatically turns on/off when the liftgate is
opened and closed, regardless of the position of the
ignition.
NOTE:
In order to preserve the life of the battery, the light will turn
off after 15 minutes.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
lever on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the first two
detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent
for low wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold.
If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then
turn off.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull For Front Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Push the lever upward to the Mist position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 226.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of two detent positions for
intermittent settings to activate this feature.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper lever is rotated from the O (off)
position to the first intermittent setting or from the first
intermittent setting to the second intermittent setting, the
wipers will perform an immediate wipe cycle to clean the
windshield.
Rain Sensor Location
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper delay position one is the
least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
Products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain
Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position, and the automatic transmis-
sion is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions exist.
Rain Sensing Wipers — Inhibition — When the user
changes the ignition position from OFF to ON/RUN with
the windshield wiper lever already in the intermittent
position, no wipe cycle is performed for safety reasons.
This temporary inhibition avoids accidental activations
of the wiping (e.g. during the hand washing of the wind-
shield, blocking the blades in ice/snow conditions).
The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in one of
the following ways:
Moving the lever from the O (off) position to the inter-
mittent positions.
One Mist command actuation.
The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
rain sensor detects the presence of rain.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
NOTE:
If the front wipers are moving and the vehicle is shifted in
REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round up to
clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released, the pump will resume normal operation.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the
parked position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is
below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling
performance. Rotate the driver temperature
control adjust knob counterclockwise for
MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature
displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed
and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control button to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on. Pushing the AUTO control
button will cause the A/C operation to change
to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the
radiator and through the condenser.
SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature
on/off. The Sync indicator illuminates when
Sync is on. Sync synchronizes the passenger
temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger
temperature setting while in Sync mode will automatically
exit this feature and return to the separate management
of air temperatures in the two zones.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
illuminates when Recirculation is on.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is
not recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode
is highly recommended for efficiency. Air Conditioning
(A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. Push the button on the faceplate to turn
AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Ú page 40.
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The MAX Defrost indicator illuminates when
MAX Defrost is on. Performing this function will
cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual
mode. The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning
compressor is turned on (LED on), both driver and
passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost
mode is selected (LED on), rear defroster is turned on
(LED on) and the air recirculation is turned off (LED off).
If the MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the climate system
will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Driver And Passenger Temperature Knobs
The passenger temperature knob provides the passenger
with independent temperature control. The driver
temperature knob provides the driver with independent
temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set
the desired temperature.
Rotating the temperature knob clockwise increases the
temperature.
Rotating the temperature knob counterclockwise
decreases the temperature.
The set temperature is shown on the display.
Turning the temperature knob completely in one direction
or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or
LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display,
respectively. Rotate the driver temperature knob fully
counterclockwise for maximum A/C (LO).
To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob
to the desired temperature.
NOTE:
Rotating the passenger temperature control knob while in
Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control
adjustment knob.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons to change the airflow distribution
mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Front Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the faceplate
to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button,
the Climate Control system will return to the previous
setting.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing both the
Panel Mode button and the Floor Mode button,
activating them both. Air comes from the
instrument panel outlets and floor outlets.
A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
CAUTION!
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mix Mode
Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both the
Defrost Mode button and the Floor Mode
button, activating them both. Air is directed
through the floor, defrost, and side window
demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Hi-Level Mode
Hi-Level Mode is obtained by pushing the
Defrost Mode button and the Panel Mode
button. Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and the defrost outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the side window demister outlets.
Tri-Level Mode
Tri-Level Mode is obtained by pressing the
Defrost Mode button, the Panel Mode button,
and the Floor Mode button. Air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, the defrost outlets,
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through
the side window demister outlets.
Climate Control Power Button
Press and release the Climate Control Power
button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current setting
to the coldest output of air. Moving the
temperature control knob away from the
MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
(Continued)
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air
forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the temperature
control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature
control knob counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available. The
blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
CAUTION!
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the blower
control knob to the OFF (O) position.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel and
the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the driver
and front passenger. The system will then automat-
ically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
(If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 265.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on
at least once a month for approximately 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before
the Summer.
NOTE:
The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does not
pollute the environment in the event of accidental
leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of
R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost
Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the
windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the following
operations:
Turns on the air conditioning compressor when
environmental conditions are suitable
Turns air recirculation off
Sets blower fan to the maximum speed and displays
the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED illumi-
nated)
Directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers
Activates the heated rear window defrost
Activates the heated windshield (if equipped)
When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED turns
off. With the function activated, the only possible manual
adjustments are pushing the A/C control button, adjusting
the fan speed and turning the heated rear window off.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are
pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the
Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield
distribution activates the Climate Control system
compressor and the air recirculation is set to outside air
intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
turned off, even after the engine has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO mode (AUTO LED
will turn off). To restore automatic control of compressor,
push the AUTO button again.
NOTE:
With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the
passenger compartment with a temperature lower than
the outside temperature. Under certain environmental
conditions, windows could fog rapidly since the air is
not dehumidified.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element located
at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions
are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with
full defrost,
and when the
ambient temperature is below
33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote
Start will resume its previous operation. If the Wind-
shield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and opera-
tion will continue.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments are located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartments
To open the upper compartment, push in the button
located on the bottom side of the upper door. The door will
automatically open.
To close the upper compartment, push downward on the
door's surface to latch the door closed.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
NOTE:
Do not insert objects in the glove compartments that
will not allow the compartment to fully close.
The glove compartments should be completely closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front seats.
If your vehicle is equipped with an adjustable armrest, the
armrest can be adjusted by moving it in the direction
indicated by the arrows.
Front Armrest Handle
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (MAX A/C)
on, and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to flush
out the hot air. Adjust the controls
as needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control
to (Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Mix
Mode) and turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging
starts to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
2 — Lower Glove Compartment Release Handle
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Storage Compartment
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access
the storage compartment.
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
Located below the heating ventilation and air conditioning
controls is the front USB ports.
Front USB Ports
This feature allows an external device to be plugged into
the USB port.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
Rear Center Console USB Port — If Equipped
A third, charge only USB port is located on the back of the
center console.
Rear Center Console USB Port
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port may be
charge only or media file capable.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS
There is one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in this vehicle,
located under the climate controls. This power outlet can
power mobile phones, electronics and other low power
devices.
This power outlet is located in front of the gear selector.
12 Volt Power Outlet
NOTE:
The power outlet can be changed to battery powered
at all times by switching the power outlet Engine
Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit fuse from
location F84 to F23.
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 Amp)
at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to
be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your new vehicle warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location:
F84 Fuse 20A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel, below
the climate controls. To activate the cigar lighter, push and
release the knob. After a few seconds the knob
automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar
lighter is ready for use.
NOTE:
Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W
to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adapters.
ASHTRAY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into
one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
GRAB HANDLES
The grab handles are located immediately above the
doors. The rear handles are equipped with hooks for dress
hangers.
Rear Grab Handle Assembly
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and passenger door power window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down
briefly, then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly when the window has reached the desired position.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
The driver and front passenger power door window
switches have an Auto-Up feature.
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
1 — Grab Handle
2 — Hook
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature be interrupted and stop
working, the feature will need to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
NOTE:
All doors must be closed before beginning the Auto-Up
reset procedure.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the switch will turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout switch again (the
indicator light on the switch will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER FOLDING ROOF — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Folding Roof, the
control switch can be found on the overhead console.
Power Folding Roof Open/Close Switch
NOTE:
The Power Folding Roof is non-removable.
The Power Folding Roof will not open in temperatures
below -2°F (-18°C) or above 176°F (80°C).
The Power Folding Roof will not operate at vehicle
speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h).
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when opening and
closing the Power Folding Roof as a result of the Uconnect
system switching between Power Roof Closed and Power
Roof Open audio modes.
OPENING THE POWER FOLDING ROOF
Express Mode
Push the open/close switch and release it within one-half
second and the power roof will open automatically from
any position. The power roof will open fully and stop
automatically. Push the open/close switch and release it
within one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position and it stops 7.9 inches
(20 cm) before full closure. For full closure, push and hold
the open/close switch.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the power roof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the power roof manually, push and hold the open/
close switch to the full open position, then release. To
close the power roof manually, push and hold the open/
close switch to the fully closed position, then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the power roof movement. The power roof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
CLOSING THE POWER ROOF
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second. The power roof will close fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During
Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the power roof.
Manual Mode
To close the power roof manually, push and hold the close
switch. The power roof will move forward and
automatically stop at the fully closed position. Any release
of the switch will stop the movement. The power roof will
remain in a partially closed position until the switch is
pushed and held again.
POWER ROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the window glass. For important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle
Ú page 265.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sliding roof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 106.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power roof while operating the power roof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open power roof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the power top.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the power roof opening.
Injury may result.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RELEARN PROCEDURE
For vehicles equipped with a power sliding roof, there is a
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the power
roof when the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset the
power sliding roof, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and start the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power sliding roof is in the fully closed
position.
3. Push and hold the open/close switch for 10 seconds.
This will put the power sliding roof into calibration
mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while the
top goes fully open and then back to fully close.
5. Once the power sliding roof has stopped in the
fully closed position, release the open/close switch.
The power sliding roof is now reset and ready to use.
NOTE:
If the open/close switch is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be complete, and
the procedure must be repeated.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety latch release lever toward the passenger side
of the vehicle. The hood release lever is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
3. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the
hood. Be sure the rod is locked into position.
Hood Prop System
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Support Rod
3 — Support Rod Seat
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and
reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, push the electronic
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Electronic Liftgate Release
When opening the door, the interior dome light will
illuminate. The interior dome light will turn off
automatically by closing the liftgate
Ú page 32.
If the liftgate is left open, the interior dome light will shut
off after a few minutes to conserve battery life.
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Lower the headrests and fold the seatbacks.
1 — Yellow Tab
2. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab from the
liftgate latching mechanism.
3. With the yellow tab removed, insert the screwdriver
into the now open release tab slot to trigger the
release of the liftgate.
2 — Release Tab Slot
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
Grab the liftgate closing handle and lower the liftgate.
Liftgate Closing Handle
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession
of the key fob because the liftgate will be locked automat-
ically.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be
adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for ease
of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This
position also makes it possible to use the space below as
another compartment for storing fragile or smaller
objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat are
folded flat, it creates space for objects of long dimensions.
This position is recommended only when transporting
objects, then move the load floor back to position 1.
NOTE:
With a full size spare, the floor will be at the elevated
position.
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift up on the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
Cargo Area Storage
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides
and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and remove the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can
be used for the storage of objects that allows you to obtain
a uniform level when loading.
Cargo Box
NOTE:
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lb (110 kg).
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position
with respect to cargo area.
2
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
NOTE:
The illumination of the graphics on the instrument cluster
may vary according to the version (Monocolor or Color
display).
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates the speed of the car.
2. Fuel Level Gauge
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel indicates
the amount of fuel left in the tank.
The light comes on, together with a chime and the
display of a message in the instrument cluster
display, when the gas tank has 1.5 to 2 gallons
(5 to 7 liters) of fuel remaining.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The vehicle can be equipped with multi functional
instrument cluster display which offers useful
information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with a mechanical key),
opening/closing of a door will activate the instru-
ment cluster display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature
The temperature gauge on the instrument panel
displays the temperature of the engine coolant
and starts providing indications when the coolant
temperature exceeds approximately 122°F
(50°C). In the normal use of the car, the tempera-
ture gauge can move in different directions based
on the use of the car. The light comes on, together
with a chime and the display of a message in the
instrument cluster display, to indicate an exces-
sive increase in the temperature of the engine
coolant. Stop the engine and contact an autho-
rized dealer.
5. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM x 1000).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The vehicle is equipped with multi functional instrument
cluster display which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with a mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the instrument cluster
display for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer. The instrument cluster display
is designed to display important information about the
vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your instrument
cluster display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the
main menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 228.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROL BUTTONS
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster. Pushing
the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows
the driver to select vehicle information and Personal
Settings.
Push the back/left arrow button to access the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item.
Push the
up arrow button to scroll upward through
the main menus and submenus (Speedometer, Trip,
Drive Mode Selector, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Audio,
Phone, Navigation, Messages, Settings).
Push the
right arrow button to access the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push the
down arrow button to scroll downward
through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer,
Trip, Drive Mode Selector, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist,
Audio, Phone, Navigation, Messages, Settings).
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE RESET —
I
F EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 55
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MAIN
M
ENU
The Main Menu is composed of several options that can
be selected by using the control buttons.
NOTE:
The display mode of the menu items varies depending
on the type of display.
For some items, a submenu is provided.
In the Uconnect system, some items on the menu are
not shown on the instrument cluster display
Ú page 53.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu/
Submenu Items
The Menu is composed of the following items:
Speedometer
Trip
Instantaneous Info
Trip A
Trip B
Drive Mode Selector — If Equipped
Auto mode
Sport mode
All Weather mode
Vehicle Info
Tire Pressure
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Lane Departure Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Navigation — If Equipped
Messages
Settings— If Equipped
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety & Assistance
Lights
Doors & Locks
Engine OFF Procedure
Speedometer
View and change the speedometer scale from mph to
km/h (km/h to mph).
Trip
This instrument cluster display menu item allows you to
view and select information about the "Trip Computer”:
Instantaneous info
View the distance to empty (miles or km).
View the instantaneous consumption (mpg, or
l/ 100km or km/l).
Trip A
View Trip A distance (miles or km).
View travel time A (hours/minutes/seconds).
View average consumption A (mpg, or l/ 100km or
km/l).
View average speed A (mph or km/h).
Trip B
View Trip B distance (miles or km).
View travel time B (hours/minutes/seconds).
View average consumption B (mpg, or l/ 100km or
km/l).
View average speed B (mph or km/h).
Drive Mode Selector
This instrument cluster display menu/submenu items
allows you to view and select information about the
"Drive Mode".
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
"Vehicle Info" is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
right arrow button and
Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the
right or
left arrow button to scroll through the following
information displays:
Tire pressure
View the information relating to the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) (if equipped).
Oil Temperature
View the engine oil temperature.
Battery Voltage
View the voltage value (state of charge) of the
battery.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
This menu item allows you to change the settings (Notice
LaneSense and Intensity LaneSense) relating to the
LaneSense system (if equipped):
Notice LaneSense
By selecting this function, you can select the “readi-
ness” of LaneSense, choosing between the options
"Near," "Medium," or "Far."
Intensity LaneSense
Using this function, you can select the force applied to
the steering wheel to keep the car in the roadway
through the electrical drive system due to LaneSense.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Automatically stops the engine during a vehicle stop under
the right conditions to reduce fuel consumption.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster. This menu shows messages related to Stop/Start.
Only one message can be viewed at a time until the
condition is cleared.
When the Stop/Start is engaged (and the engine is off),
the associated hardware indicator light is turned on. When
the Stop/Start button on the central stack is pushed, a
Stop/Start status message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
Audio
This menu item allows you to view the instrument cluster
display and the information present on the display of the
Uconnect system.
The information displayed is:
“Radio (AM or FM)”: view Radio Station Name (if
equipped), frequency, and graphical icon.
MP3: title display or song number playing.
USB: title display or song number playing.
Ipod: display the song title and graphic element.
Bluetooth®: displays the song title and a graphic
element.
SAT: displays the station name and a graphic element.
APP: displays strings and a graphic element.
Phone
This menu displays the current status of a phone
connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
If no phone is connected, the menu will not function when
the
OK button is pushed. Otherwise, if a phone is
connected, push the
OK button to enter the menu. The
following items will display:
Recent calls: displays a list of the last 10 calls.
SMS reader: displays the last 10 text messages and if
they are read or unread.
Favorite numbers: displays a maximum of six favorite
numbers.
Navigation — If Equipped
If activated, this menu item will display navigation status
and directions.
Messages (Stored)
This menu item allows you to display the information
messages/malfunction stored.
The background color of the display varies according to
the priorities of the failure:
Failed Messages with low priority display in yellow.
Failed Messages with high priority display in red.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
Settings — If Equipped
This menu item allows you to change the settings for
the following:
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
Lights
Doors and Locks
Engine OFF Procedure
Display
By selecting "Display," you can access the following
settings:
Screen Setup: Allows you to configure the display
screen.
Language: Allows you to select the language in which to
display the information/warnings.
Automatic Reset Trip B: Allows you to set the options to
reset the Trip B (never, always, every two hours or every
eight hours).
Phone Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or “Off”.
The instrument cluster display can also display the infor-
mation concerning phone mode. The information that
can be displayed is the connection status of the mobile
phone (phone connected or disconnected), the active
telephone calls/incoming/on hold, and the manage-
ment of double calls (first incoming second waiting, etc.).
Navigation Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or
“Off” on the instrument cluster display, information
relating to the navigation mode.
Units
By selecting the item "Units Of Measure,” you can select
the unit of measure used in the display.
Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom
Clock And Date
By selecting the item "clock and date," you can adjust the
clock.
Possible options are:
Set Time: Adjust hours/minutes.
Set Format: Adjust the time format "12h" (12 hours) or
"24h" (24 hours).
Set Date: Adjust day/month/year.
Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
following adjustments:
Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit (mph or
km/h), which the driver is notified through a visual and
acoustic signaling (display of a message and a symbol
on the display).
Seat Belt Buzzer: This function is only viewable when
the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start
Assist system.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item "Safety & Assistance," you can make
the following adjustments:
Full Brake Control: A selection of operating modes of
the Full Brake Control system.
Full Brake Control Sensitivity: A selection of the
"readiness" of intervention of the Full Brake Control
system, based on the distance to the obstacle.
Park Assist: A selection of the type of information
provided by Park Assist.
Park Assist Vol.: A selection of the volume of acoustic
signals provided by Park Assist.
Rain Sensing Wipers: Enabling/disabling the automatic
operation of wipers in the event of rain.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped: A selection of the
"readiness" of intervention of LaneSense.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning Buzzer Volume: Increase or decrease the
volume of the buzzer by selecting “Low”, “Medium”,
or “High”.
Maintenance Brakes — If Equipped: Activation of the
procedure to carry out braking system maintenance.
Auto Park Brake — If Equipped: Enable/disable
auto-insertion of the Electric Parking Brake.
Lights
By selecting the item "Lights," you can make the following
adjustments:
Headlight Off Delay: Set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff.
Headlight Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness.
Interior Ambient Lights: Increase or decrease the
brightness of the Interior Ambient Lights.
Greeting Lights: Enable/disable the vehicle’s Greeting
Lights.
Auto High Beam: Activate/deactivate the automatic
main beam headlights — If Equipped.
Daytime Lights: Activate/deactivate the daytime
running lights.
Cornering Lights: Activate/deactivate the cornering
lights — If Equipped.
Doors And Locks
By selecting the item "Doors & Locks," you can make the
following adjustments:
Auto Door Lock: Activate/deactivate the automatic
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving.
Auto Unlock On Exit: Automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle.
Flash Light With Lock: Activate the direction indicators
when closing the doors.
Sound Horn With Lock: Activate/deactivate the horn when
pushing the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry.
The options are "Off," "First Press,” and "Second Press."
Horn With Remote Start: Activate/deactivate the horn
at the Remote Starting of the engine with the Remote
Keyless Entry.
Remote Door Unlock Without Passive Entry: Allows you
to choose whether to unlock all the doors or only the
driver’s side door on the first push of the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry.
Door Unlock With Passive Entry: Allows you to open the
driver door only on the first push of the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry or using the passive entry
handles on the doors or liftgates.
Passive Entry — If Equipped: Activate the automatic
locking of the doors.
Engine OFF Procedure — If Equipped: Allows you to turn
off the engine from the instrument cluster in the event
of an ignition switch failure. Instructions for turning off
the engine via the instrument cluster display controls
will display in the instrument cluster.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In
this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the
Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches "H," this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more
door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will
also be a single chime.
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising drivers
to take a break in time. Once Drowsy Driver is
detected, A pop-up will display continuously
until the driver presses the
OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until the
condition is no longer true.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
Ú page 77.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position
and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if
the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 171.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display and
a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.
Contact an authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is
open and not fully closed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 80.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Audio System Failure Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure of
the Audio System. Contact an authorized
dealership as soon as possible.
Drive Mode System Overheating Warning
Light
This symbol appears, together with a dedicated
message on the display, in case of overheating
of the Drive Mode Selector system. In these
conditions, the Drive Mode Selector system can
still be used to select the required driving mode, but the
mode will be engaged only when the system cools down.
The symbol will stay on for as long as the overheating
condition persists.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Drowsiness Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsiness Detected System is not operating
correctly and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
External Light Failure Warning Light —
If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come
on when a failure to one of the following lights
is detected:
Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff
failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level
sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to
an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 92.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service Warning Light — If Equipped
The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle
maintenance at fixed intervals. For further
information
Ú page 216. This message is
displayed automatically along with the
warning light when the key is turned to RUN - 1,242 miles
(2,000 km) or 30 days before these deadlines, and
reappears every time the key is turned to RUN. The
indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to
the "Unit Of Measurement" settings. When the next
scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to
RUN, the word “Service” will appear on the display,
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
followed by the number of miles or kilometers left.
Contact an authorized dealership. The operations in the
“Maintenance Plan” will be performed and the message
will be reset.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run
the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
Full Brake Control System Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you.
Full Brake Control System Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
the Full Brake Control System is off.
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has
occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle
security system system has detected an
attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is
set to the desired speed
Ú page 79.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 92.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can
be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 92.
Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is light sensor
failure. If this light illuminates, have an
authorized dealer inspect it.
Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The indicator light will illuminate white along
with a notification text message (Speed
Warning Set to XX followed by unit). When the
set speed is exceeded, a single chime will
sound along with pop-up message of “Speed Warning
Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can
be set.
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
The Idle Coasting feature works by allowing
engine speeds to drop to idle, saving fuel. This
feature is a menu option. The indicator is only
seen when Idle Coasting is chosen and active.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control
has been turned on, but not set, or canceled by
the driver
Ú page 79.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 106.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the
accelerator.
3. Press the START/STOP ignition button and release it
as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the
OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before
attempting to restart the engine.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Briefly press the START/
STOP ignition button and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run but will automatically disengage when the
engine is running.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions,
an externally powered electric block heater (if equipped) is
required below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C),
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The message
“Plug in Engine Heater” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the ambient temperature is below -4°F
(-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to
avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press the START/STOP ignition button and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended
Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
STARTING AND OPERATING 69
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and the “Cold Weather Operation”
procedure, and has not experienced an extended park
condition as identified in “Extended Park Starting”
procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 10 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the
RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM,
without accelerating suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum perfor-
mance.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times
consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning off the car (place the ignition from the RUN
position to the OFF position), the power supply to the
accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
NOTE:
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition Ú page 53.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will
sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the
ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a front
door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to cool
before shutting off the engine.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
I
F EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on
the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will
run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut
off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although
the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is
normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 208.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 STARTING AND OPERATING
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 271.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
Manually, by pulling up on the EPB switch momentarily
to apply.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the
vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the parking brake is
fully engaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the EPB,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement.
The EPB can be applied even when the ignition is in the
OFF position however, it can only be released when the
ignition is in the RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 60 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
automatically engage whenever the transmission is
moved into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot
is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
The EPB will be automatically released if the driver’s seat
belt is buckled (in case of automatic transmission) and
driver's intention to start (in forward or reverse direction)
is recognized by the system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be in the
RUN position. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a sound
from the back of the car while the parking brake
disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the trans-
mission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The EPB should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain
upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE Warning Light could
illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not available.
The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically
while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flashing. In this
status, some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In
this event, urgent service of the EPB system is required.
Do not rely on the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary.
AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h)
and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or
with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the Customer
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in the
RUN position. In some cases, if the ignition is cycled from
ON/RUN to OFF and the gear selector is not firmly locked
in the PARK position, EPB applies automatically even if
Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SAFEHOLD
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition switch is in the RUN
position.
The EPB will automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or accel-
erator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB switch while the driver door is open and the brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and
back to RUN position.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
BRAKE SERVICE MODE
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can only be done
after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator retraction
can be done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode.
This menu based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
The EPB switch not activated.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition is placed in the ON position.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster
if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster
if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
GEAR SELECTOR
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it
is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
9th gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Gear Selector Lock Button
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
GEAR RANGES
PARK (P)
The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to
use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the
transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the Electric Park Brake and
shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 103.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 213.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds
or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear,
are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward
(+) or forward (-), except as follows:
The transmission will automatically upshift lower and
higher when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on model) when
coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or
rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is electronically monitored for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock,
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. Also, the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition
must be in the RUN position (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the
button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions,
the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front
wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED
The Dynamic Selector combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide
the best performance in all driving conditions.
Dynamic Selector Switch
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
The Dynamic Selector consists of the following positions:
Auto Mode – This mode is designed for comfort and safety
in normal driving conditions. In versions equipped with
All-Wheel Drive, this mode also reduces fuel consumption
by automatically altering the distribution of torque
between the front and rear axle.
All Weather Mode – This mode offers increased traction
control and stability control for low traction conditions
such as driving on a dirt road or off-road as well as wet and
slippery roads.
Sport Mode – This mode is designed to increase steering
feedback to the driver with a slight increase in effort and
changes the transmission shift schedules for more
aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while
driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is
desired in spirited cornering.
WARNING MESSAGES
In the event of a system fault, the system automatically
defaults to “Auto” mode and a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
For further information
Ú page 53.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power
steering system adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” OR “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM” message and
a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument
cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance
Ú page 53.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was designed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop”
mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 53.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode (if equipped
with 4WD).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE position.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
except in the PARK and NEUTRAL position.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD Low mode
(if equipped with 4WD).
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park
Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Steering wheel is beyond threshold.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the Electric Park
Brake may require a manual release (press brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch)
Ú page 53.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/
START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 53.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM" message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 53.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. A cruise indicator light,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Deactivation
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
ESC intervention, brake control mitigation, Electronic Park
Brake intervention, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Cruise
Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not
equipped with ACC
Ú page 79.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 277.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following shows in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last display
selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — Distance Setting Increase
WARNING!
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), or other stability control systems
are operating or have just operated
During automatic braking by the Full Brake Control
system (if equipped)
When Cruise Control is activated
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle. Neither system can be
set below 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “Adaptive Cruise
Control Override” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
ensure the system is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume Speed
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES button
and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control can only be resumed at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
If Sport mode is chosen on the Dynamic Selector, the
ACC system will switch to Sport mode. The system will
become more reactive in case of acceleration.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This distance setting will show in the instrument cluster
display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Light. The system adjusts
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 82.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
appear in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Full Brake Control system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“FRONT RADAR SENSOR TEMPORARILY
BLOCKED” WARNING
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Do not use solvents or
abrasive substances.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/Full Brake Control System operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,
or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/Full Brake
Control system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Frontal Camera
Service Required” or “Cruise Control Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a temporary
malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear and/or front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 91.
Park Assist will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
Park Assist is active when the gear selector is shifted to
REVERSE or to a forward gear and an obstacle is detected,
as long as the system is on. When the gear selector shifted
to NEUTRAL (or PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the
system becomes inactive. When the vehicle is moving
forward, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed remains below approximately 11 mph (18 km/h).
Reducing the speed approximately below 9 mph
(15 km/h), the system will come back active. When the
vehicle is moving in REVERSE, the system will remain
active as long as the speed remains below the maximum
operating speed of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the maximum
speed limit is exceeded, the system is disabled and the
Park Assist switch LED will illuminate. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed reduces below
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK ASSIST SENSORS
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper (if equipped), monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 39 inches (100 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY
The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Uconnect
system
Ú page 106.
The Park Assist Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle
Ú page 53.
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
The Park Assist warning screen will be displayed when an
obstacle is detected while the vehicle is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, as long as the vehicle speed is below 7 mph
(11 km/h) when in REVERSE and below 11 mph
(18 km/h) when in DRIVE. When the vehicle is in
REVERSE, the Park Assist warning screen will always be
displayed.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right front or rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right front or rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and
the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
slow, to fast, to continuous.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — Slow Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
Park Assist will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
59 inches (150 cm)
59-52 inches
(150-130 cm)
52-41 inches
(130-105 cm)
41-34 inches
(105-85 cm)
34-24 inches
(85-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 39 inches
(100 cm)
39-32 inches
(100-80 cm)
32-24 inches
(80-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Park Assist will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is stationary.
If the obstacle has been detected within less than
12 inches (30 cm), then the Park Assist will not turn off the
Front Park Assist audible alert.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system
Ú page 106.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the instrument
cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
Park Assist will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARK
A
SSIST
Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with
the Park Assist switch, located on the
instrument panel below the Uconnect display,
next to the USB ports.
When the Park Assist switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“Park Assist Disabled” message for approximately
five seconds
Ú page 53.
The Park Assist switch LED will be on when the Park Assist
system is disabled or requires service. The Park Assist
switch LED will be off when the system is enabled.
If the Park Assist switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Park Assist switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
NOTE:
The rear sensors are automatically deactivated if a
trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s trailer elec-
trical socket. The front sensors stay active and can provide
acoustic and visual warnings. The rear sensors are auto-
matically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
SERVICE THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Park Assist System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will show the "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds.
If "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
Clean the Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascia/bumper are clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep the
Park Assist system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
Clean the Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Park Assist system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If it is necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence
within the sensor’s field of view. The filtering operation
must be performed only by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward facing camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane. When only a single lane marking is
detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver if removed. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the end of
the turn signal stalk, located on the left side of
the steering column.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button once. A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state (on
or off) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using Park Assist. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using Park Assist, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Park Assist.
CAUTION!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On
(Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if a
lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off), and the Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
Lane Approached
(Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is armed to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed
(White Lines/Green Telltale)
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed
(Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached
(Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen
Ú page 106.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Full Brake Control system, etc.).
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
when the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will
be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a note
to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
Back Up Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. Display of the camera
image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via
Uconnect Settings.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 3 ft
(30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel system uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel system is designed so that it prevents
the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door by pulling the tab outwards.
Filler Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed
with filling the fuel tank.
Filler Pipe
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow
fuel to drain from nozzle.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close
the door.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar
Ú page 254.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
1 — Fuel Filler Door
2 — Dust Cover
WARNING!
Do not affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler neck
other than what is provided on the car.
The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the
vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the
tank, creating dangerous conditions.
Do not approach the neck of the tank with open
flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with your
face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the
pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 96.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 96.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
1.3L Turbo AWD 2,000 lb (906 kg) with braked trailer 200 lb (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard
Ú
page 250.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Ú page 257.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer
Ú page 257.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 257. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into the vehicle's electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have
a collision.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in
a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing the
trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the Customer Program-
mable Features in the Uconnect Settings.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may be
towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
Towing Condition Wheels Off The Ground All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED
FRONT NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4 NAV
With 7-inch Display system
Ú page 122.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 273, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
MULTIMEDIA 107
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Touchscreen
And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
Press the Uconnect button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, only press one button at a time
to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu,
press and release the preferred setting option until a
check mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
1 — Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Buttons On The Faceplate
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
are English, Français, and Español.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
MULTIMEDIA 109
Units
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Touchscreen Beep
This setting will allow you to adjust the touchscreen beep. The setting options are
“On” or “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Units This setting will change the unit of measurement between “US”, “Metric”, and “Custom”.
Custom
This setting changes the “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US],
MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature”
(°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
MULTIMEDIA 111
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) This setting will allow you to set the date.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Brake Control
Full Brake Control System includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies
additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to
avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime
sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more
brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it
applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of a potential forward collision and
sounds an audible chime to alert you. Changing the Full Brake Control System status
to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
Brake Control Sensitivity
The Full Brake Control System Sensitivity setting determines at what relative distance the
vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system warns you of a possible
collision, based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time,
whereas “Near” gives you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance
between the two vehicles. “Med” gives you a reaction time in between Near and Far.
LaneSense Warning
The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the Lane Control system
warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength This feature allows you to set the lane control strength to “Low”, “Med”, or “High”.
Park Assist
The Park Assist system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the
transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph
(11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the
proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound” or “Sound + Display.”
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
Front Park Assist Volume
This setting will allow you to adjust the Front Park Assist Volume to “Low”, “Medium”,
or “High”.
Rear Park Assist Volume
This setting will allow you to adjust the Rear Park Assist Volume to “Low”, “Medium”,
or “High”.
Blind Spot Assist
When the Blind Spot Assist feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is
activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the
outside mirrors and sounds an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia/bumper is not damaged, the
sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify
sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Rear View Camera Delay
The Rear View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen displays the
rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE. This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Rear View Camera Guidelines
The Active Rear View Camera Guidelines feature overlays the Rear View Camera image
with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked.
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Rain Sensing Wipers This setting will allow you to turn the rain sensing wipers on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors
Brakes
After pressing the Mirrors button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will allow you to turn the auto folding side mirrors on or off.
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Brake Service
Selecting the Brake Service feature will display a pop-up asking whether or not you would
like to retract the park brakes for brake system service.
Auto Park Brake This setting will allow you to turn the auto park brake on or off.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior
ambient lighting.
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to adjust the headlight sensitivity between “1”, “2”, or “3”
with 1 being the least sensitive and 3 being the most sensitive.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the headlight off delay to “0”, “30”, “60”, or
“90” seconds.
Greeting Lights This setting will allow you to turn the greeting lights on or off.
High Beam Control This setting will allow you to turn the high beam control on or off.
Daytime Running Lights
When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be
turned “On” or “Off”. This feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the
vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) turns on, on the relevant
side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flash lights with lock on or off.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is
opened.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flash lights with lock on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will allow you to set the Sound Horn With Lock feature “Off”, “1st Press”, or
“2nd Press”.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will allow you to turn horn with remote start on or off.
Keyless Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press
the key fob Lock or Unlock button.
Remote Door Unlock
When “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push
of the key fob Unlock button; you must push the key fob Unlock button twice to unlock
the passengers’ doors. When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on
the first press of the key fob Unlock button.
If “All Doors” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry-equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver Door” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grabbed. Touching the handle more
than once will only result in the driver’s door unlocking. If the driver’s door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
Audio
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heat Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering
wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not
activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort
systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will have the radio automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will
recall whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The available options are “On”, “Off”,
and “Last Recall”.
Setting Name Description
When the Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings concerning electronics during vehicle shut off.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on after the vehicle has been shut off. The available
options are “0 MIN” and “20 MIN”
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
Phone/Bluetooth®
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Info
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to resetting the system back to its default.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings To Default
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to
their defaults.
When he Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the option to clear personal data saved to the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature setting’s may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices
and presets.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1 — Radio Button 5 — Phone Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Settings Button
3 — Nav Button 7 — Trip Button
4 — Uconnect Button
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access
the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 125.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
Ú page 136.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
Uconnect Press the Uconnect button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Trip
Press the Trip button on the touchscreen to view the car’s trip information. This function
is composed of the “Instant Info” items (“Range” and “Current fuel consumption”)
and the two separate trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” for monitoring the
vehicle’s “complete journey” in a reciprocally independent manner.
Nav (Navigation) — If Equipped
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s built-in Navigation
software
Ú page 149.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Uconnect button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a
radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off.
Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being stuck.
Feature Description
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a
safe location and set the parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and
emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system,
moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent.
For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50.
Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's
precautions and directions
Ú page 277.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM,
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off
the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for
the beep to say a command. See an example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button and say “
Help”. The system provides you
with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew
and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer
Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US)
or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather button, and
Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
Mode.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds
in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
channel with the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
MULTIMEDIA 131
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can
switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 MULTIMEDIA
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by
pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys, located on the right
of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing
the X button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
MULTIMEDIA 133
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters
the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume
increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of
the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the
Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Select Source
2 — Repeat
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if
equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists,
play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio;
use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with
the VOLUME & On/Off rotary knob or MUTE button, or
MUTE button with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device. If
supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of
the browse window shows items and their sub-functions,
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can
also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the MEDIA button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the MEDIA button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the MEDIA button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
to play the selections on the USB device in random order
to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button
Ú page 126.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen
to display the current track information. Press the Info
or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel
this feature.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name) and then
push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/
text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number
(“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Blue-
tooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give
a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how
Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like
“Call John Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as
“I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as
“Who do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the following steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device
button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the
Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
“Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
device will take precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of
the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
Ú page 144.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before the
latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if
available, the previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are
transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the
next phone connection.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
button or the Settings Gear button next to the
selected number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current
call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
on the Phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a
command. See some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth®
ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/
RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 277.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your Android™
6.0 or higher powered smartphone
with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number
of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use
Android Auto™, perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to
one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the
Android Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first
time you plug your device in the app begins to
download. Your vehicle should be in PARK the first
time you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communication
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the beep or
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take
you to a desired destination by voice. You can
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides
voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/
(US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canada).
For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work
with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing through
Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media
screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,
and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
is launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the
latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android™ best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your
smartphone’s data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one
of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™,
to activate Android™ VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need
an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an
active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display,
you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
active data plan. You can check which smartphones
are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and
stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,
Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not
work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also
launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the
touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri
on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a
Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or
any third party application installed on your
device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can
also use select third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also
touch the Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed
in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with
Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth®
Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for
the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
function. The connected device is unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or
Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System —
If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
messages. However, another device can also be paired to
the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source,
so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched
from the front and center console USB ports.
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
NAVIGATION MAIN MENU
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav button on
the touchscreen.
Navigation Main Menu
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Search
Press to search for a Point Of Interest (POI) or
specific address.
Current Route
Press to view and edit the current route. This menu option
is only available when navigating to a destination.
My Places
Press to select from a list of saved destinations, including
the saved Home address, Work address, and
Recent destinations.
Parking
Press to open the map view with the nearest
parking locations.
Gas Station
Press to open the map view with the nearest
gas station locations.
Settings
Press to open up the settings menu and alter map and
route settings.
Help Press to open up the help menu.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
NAVIGATING A ROUTE
Navigation Route View
Once a route is programmed, the map view will be
displayed and highlight the route as a light blue bar. The
route tracker is on the right side of the screen and shows
the time and distance to the final destination. It also
indicates stops and other points of interest along the way
with icons that move closer as you near them.
The direction distance is displayed at the top of the
screen, and the main menu can be accessed at any time
by pressing the Menu button: the four white dots in the
bottom left-hand corner of the screen. The route will
continue to display behind the menu as you travel along it.
SEARCH
Search
To search for a destination and start navigation, follow
these steps:
1. While in the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Search button.
2. If searching using an address, begin typing the
address on the keyboard. If searching the name of a
destination, press “Point of Interest” first before
typing.
3. Select the location from the list. The display will
switch to the map view and will show the location of
the selected destination.
4. Press the Navigate button — the red steering wheel
icon — to begin navigating to the selected location.
NOTE:
Pressing the More button, the three dot icon, next to the
Navigate button brings up the options to add the desti-
nation to the My Places menu, add the destination to the
current route, and more. Within More, you can use the
destination as a starting point and view information about
the location.
CURRENT ROUTE
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Current Route
button on the touchscreen and select one of the following
to adjust or change your current route.
NOTE:
Current Route can only be selected from the Navigation
Main Menu if the navigation system is currently navigating
to a destination.
Current Route Options
1 — Navigation View Button
2 — Zoom Button
3 — Next Turn Instructions
4 — Arrival Time and Distance
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Points Of Interest On Route
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to clear the current
route from the Navigation system.
Change Route Type
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the
current routes type to one of the following options:
Fastest route: routes the vehicle to the destination
using the roads that will take the least amount of time.
Shortest route: routes the vehicle to the destination
using the roads that will be the shortest amount of total
distance traveled.
Most eco-friendly route: routes the vehicle to the
destination using the roads that will use the least
amount of fuel.
Avoid interstate highways: routes the vehicle to the
destination avoiding all interstate highways.
Find Alternative
Press this button on the touchscreen to view an overhead
view of your route, along with several others to choose
from. Each with the time difference between your current
route and these new ones. Select the colored button that
corresponds to the new route you want to take.
Avoid Blocked Road
Press this button on the touchscreen to select a road you
wish to avoid on your route that is blocked.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Avoid Part Of Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to bring up the list of
directions for your current route. Select the part of the
route you wish to avoid and the system will reroute the
navigation track to your destination.
Avoid On This Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to select certain
types of roads to avoid on your navigational route.
Show Instructions
Press this button on the touchscreen to view the directions
of your route in list form.
Add Stop To Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to add an additional
stop to your current route. Pressing the Search button will
bring up the keyboard where you can type in the address
or name of the destination you wish to add.
Reorder Stops
Press this button on the touchscreen to reorder the
different stops on the current route.
Play Route Preview
Press this button on the touchscreen to begin a simulated
preview of what your route will look like. The vehicle icon
will begin traveling along your route until it reaches its
destination. You can also end the preview by returning to
the Current Route menu and selecting Stop Route Preview.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
MY PLACES
My Places
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the My Places
button on the touchscreen to display a list of saved
destinations. The following destinations are selectable
along with any other destinations that have been saved.
Home
Press the Home button to navigate to the saved Home
destination. If no Home destination is saved, the
Navigation system will ask you to search for the
destination to save as your Home destination.
Work
Press the Work button to navigate to the saved Work
destination. If no Work destination is saved, the
Navigation system will ask you to search for the
destination to save as your Work destination.
Recent Destinations
Press Recent Destinations button on the touchscreen to
display a list of destinations the Navigation system has
recently routed to for you to select.
NOTE:
The Add and Edit List buttons allow you to add, remove,
and reorder destinations that appear within the list.
Editing My Places
1 — Recent Destination Button
2 — Home Button
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
PARKING
Searching For Parking
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Parking button
on the touchscreen to bring up a view of your current
location on the map. Within this map view, blue “P” icons
will appear pointing out the locations of nearby parking lots.
Press the desired parking lot icon to bring up the location,
and select the steering wheel icon to navigate to it.
GAS STATIONS
Searching For Gas Stations
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Gas Stations
button on the touchscreen to bring up a view of your
current location on the map. Within this map view, white
“Gas Station” icons will appear pointing out the locations
of nearby gas stations. Press the desired gas station icon
to bring up its location, and select the steering wheel icon
to navigate to it.
SETTINGS
Navigation Settings
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Settings button to open up the Settings menu. The following settings categories are selectable within the Settings Main Menu:
Appearance
Press this button to adjust the appearance settings of the
Navigation system. The appearance settings allow you to
alter whether or not the system switches to night colors
when it is dark, change the arrival information that is
displayed, change what appears on the route (i.e. highway
exits), when the system automatically zooms, and adjust
the guidance view style from 3D, 2D and whether or not to
show the 3D car icon.
Voices
Press this button to adjust what the Navigation system
calls out while navigating. The voices settings allow you to
turn on and off whether the system reads early
instructions, sign information, road numbers, street
names, and foreign street names out loud.
Route Planning
Press this button to adjust the route planning features of
the Navigation system. The route planning settings allow
you to change whether or not the system will prompt you
when a faster route is available, which type of route it
should plan when setting one (i.e. fastest, shortest, most
eco-friendly, or to avoid interstate highways), and what to
avoid on every route.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
Ú page 277.
Sounds & Warnings
Press this button to adjust how the Navigation system
should warn you during a route. The sounds and warnings
settings allows you to set the warning type the system will
sound, and whether or not to warn you when the vehicle is
traveling above the speed limit.
System
Press this button to reset the Navigation system. This will
reset the Navigation system to its factory setting and
remove all saved data.
Help
Press the question mark icon to enter the Help menu.
Within the Help menu, you may view the About page that
displays system information.
5
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock.
Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in ON/RUN mode, have the
light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
and Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel
for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for
the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other active safety systems, follow the
instruction provided.
There are two operation modes of active safety systems
on the vehicle:
ESC On
Partial Off
ESC On
All active safety systems are enabled. This is the normal
operating mode when driving a vehicle.
This mode should be used in most driving conditions.
The system will be in "ESC On" mode every time the
engine is started
NOTE:
You are advised to select "Partial Off " mode only for
specific driving requirements.
Partial Off
By pressing the ESC OFF button located below the
radio screen when driving, the intervention of the ESC and
TCS systems is limited to braking action on the single
wheels.
The other systems remain enabled. Activation of this
mode is indicated by the warning lamp on the instrument
panel switching on (if equipped, together with a message
on the display).
To restore "ESC On" operating mode, press the button
below the radio screen again.
"ESC On" mode will automatically reactivate every time the
engine is started.
NOTE:
When traveling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may
be helpful to activate "Partial Off" mode: in these condi-
tions, you can obtain better traction by slipping the drive
wheels.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the
Traction Control System (TCS) section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine
power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current settings in the instrument cluster display see
Ú page 53.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to
deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to
avoid a misdetection
Ú page 106.
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the radar sensors located
on the rear fascia/bumper with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Rear Sensor Locations
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors, in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert (whenever the turn signal is
activated) and reducing the radio volume
Ú page 164.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 277.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
RCP is not a backup aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled
and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Blinded Sensor
In the case of a blinded sensor:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot
Monitoring Unavailable - Wipe Rear Bumper Corners.”
NOTE:
The rear fascia/bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporarily unavailable:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot
Monitoring Temporarily Unavailable.”
In the case of the system being completely unavailable:
A chime will turn on.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot
Monitoring Unavailable - Service Required.”
NOTE:
The vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH
M
ITIGATION - IF EQUIPPED
The Full Brake Control system with Mitigation provides the
driver with audible warnings (through the radio), visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
braking are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
The Full Brake Control system monitors the information
from the forward looking sensors as well as the Elec-
tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the proba-
bility of a forward collision. When the system
determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
After the end of the intervention of automatic braking, the
transmission may remain in last gear stored; therefore the
car could lurch forward, once the brakes release a few
seconds later. If the Full Brake Control system event stops
the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
If a Full Brake Control system event begins at a speed
below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Full Brake Control system event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
Full Brake Control System Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 277.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for Full Brake Control system
activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
The Full Brake Control system alerts may be triggered
on objects other than vehicles such as guardrails or
sign posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal Full Brake Control
system activation and functionality.
The Full Brake Control system is intended for on-road
use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the Full Brake
Control system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning Full Brake Control System
On Or Off
The Full Brake Control system menu setting is located in
the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 106.
NOTE:
The default status of Full Brake Control system is
“Warning + Active Braking.” This allows the system to warn
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
and enable the active braking.
Changing the Full Brake Control system status to “Off”
deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking
will be available in case of a possible collision.
Changing the Full Brake Control system status to
“Only Warning” prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a
potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible
and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is possible when the
vehicle is stopped or moving.
NOTE:
The Full Brake Control system state is kept in memory
from one key cycle to the next. It will remain the same
when the vehicle is turned off and is restarted.
WARNING!
The Full Brake Control System is not intended to avoid a
collision on its own, nor can the Full Brake Control
System detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Changing Full Brake Control System
Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect
system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by
choosing one of the following three options: "Near",
"Medium" or "Far"
Ú page 106.
The default option is "Medium". This setting provides that
the system notify the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a standard
distance, intermediate between the other two possible
settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle
in front when the latter is at a greater distance, giving you
the chance to act on the brakes in a more limited and
gradual way. This setting gives the driver the maximum
possible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
By changing the option to "Near", the system will warn the
driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a
reaction time to the driver lower than the settings
"Medium" and "Far", in the case of a potential accident,
which will provide a more dynamic driving experience.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained in
memory when the engine is switched off.
Full Brake Control System Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “Brake Control
Limited Functionality” or “Brake Control Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there
may be a condition that limits Full Brake Control system
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system will return to
its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service Full Brake Control System Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
displays “Service Brake Control”.
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
“Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warning
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often occurs at times
of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display “Brake Control Front Radar
Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and the system will
deactivate.
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective
tiles, or ice and snow). The system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the lower
grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the fascia/
bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly
on the surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s
recommended that an authorized dealer performs this
operation.
NOTE:
If the “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Full Brake Control system operation.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Precautions While Driving With Full Brake
Control System
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular
attention, while maintaining control of the car to drive in
complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect
the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the car, but that
does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this,
the system might respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
that are in front of the car but placed outside the field of
action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react in
the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, while standing in the
traffic lane of their car and inside the field of action of the
radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that
crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming
intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with
temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure
should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure.
This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
See
Ú page 250 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle's tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value
Ú page 277.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illu-
mination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS Warning Light located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will
be activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire”
text message will display when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
CHECK TPMS WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when
a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be
activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” text message will display. If the ignition is cycled,
this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists.
A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The compact spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will still turn on due to the low tire.
However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 185.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 185.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 273 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage Up
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 193.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/
LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 58.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupants Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle
to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within
one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is
the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to
the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call 1-888-327-4236.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead
of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat
in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint
Ú page 25.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH:
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 193 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 195 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. See
Ú page 192 for typical
installation instructions.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 176 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint
Ú page 25.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 195 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 189 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may need
to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 66.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 171.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
6
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flasher Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in OFF mode.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to STOP mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE
STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage
compartment, under the load floor.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Spare Tire Fastener
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench, and wheel
chocks (if equipped).
Jack And Tools
5. Remove the spare tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers
the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chock (If Equipped)
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the wheel to
be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on
a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on
a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Loosen The Wheel Bolt
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking loca-
tions.
Front And Rear Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 261.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel
bolt wrench counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 268.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
12. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the
wheel. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
SEMI–AUTO KIT
DESCRIPTION
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
If a tire is punctured, you can make an
emergency repair using the Semi-Auto
Kit located in the trunk beneath the
load floor.
The Semi-Auto Kit includes:
Power Cord.
Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid.
Filler tube.
Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph
(80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily visible to
the driver (e.g. on the dashboard) after repairing the
tire.
Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge and
connectors.
An instruction pamphlet for reference in prompt and
correct use of the Semi-Auto Kit, which must be then
given to the personnel dealing with the sealant-treated
tire.
A pair of protective gloves.
Adapters for inflating different elements.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
(Continued)
Semi-Auto Kit Components
NOTE:
The sealant is effective with external temperatures of
between -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealant
has an expiration date.
INFLATION PROCEDURE
1 — Power Cord
2 — Adhesive Label
3 — Sealant Cartridge
4 — Filler Tube
5 — Air Compressor
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Semi-Auto Kit.
Do not use the Semi-Auto Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep the Semi-Auto Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
A loose Semi-Auto Kit thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Semi-Auto Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of the Semi-Auto
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Semi-Auto Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin,
eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is
any contact with clothing.
Semi-Auto Kit sealant solution contains latex. In case
of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep the Semi-Auto Kit out of reach of
children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To use your Semi-Auto Kit, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair
the tire safely. You should be as far as possible from
the side of the road, and in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic. Activate the Hazard
Warning Flashers to make other drivers aware of
your presence.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Semi-Auto Kit hoses to
reach the valve stem and keep the tire repair kit flat
on the ground.
3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).
4. Apply the Electric Park Brake and cycle the engine
OFF.
5. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the sealing
fluid in the proper compressor holder, pushing down
hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the filler
tube and tighten the fitting on the tire valve.
Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire
6. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
7. Insert the plug into the vehicle’s center console
power outlet, then start the engine.
12 Volt Power Outlet
8. Switch the compressor on.
9. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
placard, located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door Ú page 254. In
order to obtain a more precise reading, check the
pressure value on pressure gauge with the
compressor off.
Air Compressor
1 — Sealant Cartridge
2 — Filler Tube
5 — Pressure Gauge
6 — Power Switch
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
10. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after
15 minutes, disengage the compressor from the
valve and power outlet. Then, move the vehicle
forwards approximately 33 ft (10 m) in order to
distribute the sealant inside the tire evenly, and then
repeat the inflation operation.
11. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least 26 psi
(1.8 bar) within 15 minutes of turning the compressor
on, do not drive the vehicle, and contact an
authorized dealer.
12. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km), stop, apply
the electric park brake, and recheck the tire pressure.
13. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar),
DO NOT
drive the vehicle, and see an authorized dealer.
14. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) is
detected, restore the correct pressure (with engine
running and electric park brake applied), and drive
immediately with great care to an authorized dealer.
15. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant bottle
where it can be easily seen by the driver as a
reminder that the tire has been treated with a
Semi-Auto Kit, as well as not to exceed the speed
restriction for the treated tire.
CHECKING AND RESTORING TIRE
P
RESSURE
The compressor can also be used to check and, if
necessary, restore the tire pressure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the power cord in the vehicle’s power outlet.
2. Release the quick connector and connect it directly to
the valve of the tire to be inflated.
3. Push the air release button.
Air Compressor Components
WARNING!
The Semi-Auto Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Semi-Auto Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the
padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed
restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering
wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not
operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In
addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where
warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed.
6 — Quick Connector
7 — Air Release Button
8 — Power Cord
9 — Release Button
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SEALANT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Only use original cartridges, which can be purchased at an
authorized dealer.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushing the
release button located on the side of the
compressor.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by pushing
downward firmly.
Sealant Cartridge Replacement
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post which has a positive
(+) symbol on or around
the post.
1 — Sealant Cartridge
9 — Release Button
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. When using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables’
reach, apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission
into NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
remote positive
(+) battery post.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System. It is located under the load floor of
the rear storage compartment. If refueling is necessary,
while using an approved gas can, insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to open both
flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door by
pulling the fuel door tab outwards.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Locate the bezel and boot assembly.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
4. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
front corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Location
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved
at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking
the vehicle
Ú page 160. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
This vehicle must be towed with all four wheels
OFF the
ground.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN
position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, find Instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK in order to move the vehicle
Ú page 211.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the
ground.
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used
to move a disabled vehicle. It is located under the load
floor of the rear storage compartment.
When using a tow eye, be sure to follow the Tow Eye Usage
Precautions.
Tow Eye
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground All-Wheel Drive
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL OK
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Tow Eye Warning Label
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind an access
door, located on the right side of the front fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye
into the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten. The tow eye must be fully seated to the attaching
bracket through the lower front fascia/bumper as shown.
If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket,
the vehicle should not be towed.
Front Tow Eye Access Door
Front Tow Eye Installed
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside emergen-
cies. Use with an appropriate device in accordance
with highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to maneuver
the vehicle in preparation for transport via a tow
truck.
The tow eye must not be used to move the vehicle off
the road or where there are obstacles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle
Ú page 212.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines
are not followed
Ú page 213.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break,
causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps
may break or become disengaged, causing serious
injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
Rear Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a access
door on the rear fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye
into the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the eye and
tighten. The tow eye must be fully seated to the attaching
bracket through the lower rear fascia/bumper. If the tow
eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle
should not be towed.
Rear Tow Eye Access Door
Rear Tow Eye Installed
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 182.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 185.
7
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
towing and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures
will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only
a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
MAINTENANCE PLAN
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and adjust
pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service
Kit expiration date (if provided).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check operation of lighting system
(headlamps, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment, glove
compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield
washer, engine coolant, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check engine control system operation (via
diagnostic tool).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect condition of: exterior
bodywork, underbody protection, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes),
rubber elements (boots, sleeves,
bushings, etc.).
• • • • • • • •
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade
position/wear.
• • • • • • • •
Check operation of windshield washer
system and adjust jets if necessary.
• • • • • • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate
locks and cleanliness and lubrication of
linkages.
• • • • • • •
Visually check the condition and wear of
the front and rear brakes.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check the front suspension, tie rods and
replace if necessary.
• • • • • • •
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visual inspect the condition of the
accessory drive belt.
•
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the tension of the accessory drive
belt.
• •
Inspect and replace, if required, front end
accessory drive belt, tensioner, and, idler
pulley.
• •
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. •
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
1
In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first.
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs.
2
• • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
3
• • • • • • •
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
Replace brake fluid every two years. • • • • • • •
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
• •
1. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
2. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines Ú page 271.
Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the Maintenance Plan for spark plug replacement.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
3. The engine air cleaner filter should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
NOTE:
The dipstick is integral with the cap.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the cap with
arrow on the engine cover and then screw the cap down.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/
antifreeze)
Ú page 222.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 208.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection Ú page 271.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be
used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use
filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 217.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed
in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
OFF position.
Service Mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (anti-panic) must be active for at
least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command, the
wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a
maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is
disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
The ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minute timer has expired after placing the ignition
OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go into the
parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Wiper Arm And Blade
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper
blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the
liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
Ú page 199.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 271.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different
and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper
level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
(Continued)
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically
Ú page 217.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the BRAKE Warning Light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when
the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 272.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid
Ú page 272. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may
damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch
function and the ability to shift the transmission.
WARNING!
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 272. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
Ú page 272.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse
cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment
fuse cover.)
Fuse Extractor Location
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is part of the
Body Control Module (BCM), located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for BCM fuse replacement.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system), steering system or
Body Control Module (BCM) blows, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
WARNING!
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Compartment Fuse Location
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Fuse Panel And Cover Removal
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide
completely from top to bottom.
2. Fully press the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 60 Amp Blue – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06 70 Amp Tan – – Engine Cooling fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 10 Amp Red Horn
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown WCAC Supply Pump
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green Power Control Module Engine
F18 – – 30 Amp Green Power All-Wheel Drive
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red Supply Primary Loads
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
F23 – –
20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Installed)
Power Outlet (Battery Powered)
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F30 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield *
F82 – 20 Amp Blue – Control Module Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Ignition Powered)
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – 30 Amp Pink – Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State of Charge)
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver’s Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light in case of open roof, EOBD port
F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All-Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Central stack switches, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown BSM - Brake Control Module, EPS - Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electrochromic Mirror, Heated Front Seats, SGW, Sunroof Motor.
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera, Air Conditioning, LDW - Lane Departure Warning,
ASS - Auxiliary Stack Switch, DSU - Drive Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors and rear window defrost
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ , Brake Pedal Switch (NA), EPB - Electric Parking Brake
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. Push on the left side of the access door to unhinge and remove.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
F2 – –
F3 20 Amp Yellow Electric Sunroof
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (driver side) *
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (driver side) Lumbar Adjustment *
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check that the fuse is intact.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Lamps
Lamp Name Lamp Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Name Lamp Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps HIR2
Optional Low Beam/High Bean Headlamps LED
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) LED
Front Direction Indicator Lamps WY21W
Fog Lamps (Halogen) H11
Fog Lamps (LED) LED
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) WY5W
Side Marker LED
Tail/Brake Lights LED
Turn Indicators WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Reverse P21W
License Plate Lamp W5W
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Front Lamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the
headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then
pull outwards.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
3. Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector
and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
1 — Headlamps
2 — Daytime Running Lamps
3 — Directional Indicators
4 — Fog Lamps — If Equipped
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is properly
locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the tabs and
turn it clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
LED Main Beam/Dipped Beam Headlights/Fog Lights —
If Equipped
For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized
dealership.
Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The side lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are
LED-type. To replace them, contact an authorized
dealership.
Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs,
contact an authorized dealer
Front Direction Indicator Lamp
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Light Access
3. Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counter-
clockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.
4. Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Bulb Assembly
5. Finally, refit the access door, fully tightening screws.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the
engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to
avoid the danger of burns.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Fog Lights (Halogen)
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Fog Light Access
3. Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counter-
clockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.
Fog Lamp Bulb Location
4. Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Bulb Assembly
5. Finally, refit the inspection door, fully tightening fixing
screws.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –
If Equipped
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view
mirror.
Mirror Cap
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Side Indicator Lens
3 — Side Indicator Bulb Location
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
transparent lens assembly by rotating the socket
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the
bulb straight out.
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into
place
6. Reinstall the socket into the transparent lens
assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Tail Light
Tail Lamps
The tail lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs,
contact an authorized dealership.
Brake Lights
The brake lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs,
contact an authorized dealership.
Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs,
contact an authorized dealer
3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see an
authorized dealer.
Reversing Light & Rear Direction Indicators
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open liftgate
2. Using a suitable tool, undo the two inboard screws,
then release the light cluster from the respective pin
fasteners pulling it carefully.
Tail Light Screws
3. Disconnect the connector, then undo the two screws
to access the bulbs.
Tail Light Access
1 — Tail lights/Brake Lights
2 — Direction indicator
3 — REVERSE lights
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
4. Locate faulty bulb and press slightly and turn at the
same time: counterclockwise to extract; clockwise to
install.
5. Reposition the bulb holder assembly in the headlight
body, proceed until you hear the tabs click.
6. Reinstall tail lamp assembly and close liftgate.
License Plate Lights
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
License Plate Light Location
License Plate Light
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
Lamp Assembly
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are
properly locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE:
If removing the license plate lens using a suitable tool, be
sure to cover the tip of the suitable tool with a cloth so no
damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
as shown.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is
properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor
mirror light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
properly locked between the contacts.
Visor Mirror Cover
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that
it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at
both the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Rear Dome Light
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Dome Light
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown to remove
the dome light.
Retractable Roof Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the
dome light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
WARNING!
Before proceeding with the lamp replacement, wait
for the lamp to cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the
metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 96.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 96.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lb
(392 kg).
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run
Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run Flat
mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS
sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
See
Ú page 169.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 212.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information
Ú page 259.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 259. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 251.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 101.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
(Continued)
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
ALL Front
215/55R17
215/60R16
7 mm Cable Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle
Ú page 68.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean.
Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
8
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is stamped on the plate illustrated, located on the
left front corner of the instrument panel cover, visible from
outside the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
89 ft-lb (120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 x
25.5
17 mm
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 269
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline having
an octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method.
For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of
91 octane or higher is recommended.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
9
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is
prohibited in Federal and California reformulated
gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and
drivability problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 271
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo 12.7 gal 48 L
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo 4.8 qt 4.5 L
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo 8.8 qt 8.3 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-30 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 224.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane (R+M)/2 Recommended, 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
9
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Rear Differential Module (RDM)
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
273
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental at
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-888-242-6342 or visit fiat.rsahelp.com (USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in the
Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
10
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as
a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-888-242-6342/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within 30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be
mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized FIAT® dealer. If you choose to go to
another dealer, you will be responsible for the cost if the
extra distance exceeds 10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 275
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
I
SLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
10
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately.
Canadian customers who wish to report
a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 277
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
RADIO
The following regulatory statement applies to RADIO
devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: Y70VP2RFP
IC: 7812H-VP2RFP
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the device must be installed and operated
to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and
your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux
rayonnements ISED établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de
rayonnement et votre corps
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
Remarque: Les changements ou modifications non
expressément approuvés par la partie responsable de la
conformité peuvent annuler l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à
utiliser l'équipement.
Front Radar for USA
FCC ID: NF3-MRREVO14F
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: this
device may not cause harmful interference, and this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not
expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the
FCC authorization to operate this equipment. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
10
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Front Radar for Canada
IC: 3887A-MRREVO14F
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device must not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure Information
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a
minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and
your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux
rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de
rayonnement et votre corps. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas
être place au même endroit ou utilise simultanément avec
un autre transmetteur ou antenne.
BSM System for Canada:
This device contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/
receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science, and
Economic Development Canada’s license-exempt RSS(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
L’é?metteur/ré?cepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le
pré?sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Innovation,
Sciences et Dé?veloppement é?conomique Canada
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisé?e aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioé?lec-
trique subi, mê?me si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
BSM System for USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the
equipment.
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 279
S180227006 (Keyfob)
FCC ID: M3N40821302
IC: 7812A-40821302
IFETEL: RLVCOS116-1005
S180222004 (RFHM)
FCC ID: M3N32296000
IC: 7812A-32296000
IFETEL: RLVCOS116-1003
A2C91227100 (KIN)
FCC ID:KR5A2C91227100
IC: 7812D-91227100
IFETEL: RLVCOA216-0991
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
10
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 268
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).............80
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 229
Adding Fuel......................................................................96
Adding Washing Fluid .................................................. 223
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 269
Advance Phone Connectivity....................................... 143
Air Bag........................................................................... 178
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 179
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 179
Enhanced Accident Response ......................182
, 215
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 215
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 178
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 182
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 179
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 185
Maintenance........................................................... 185
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 177
Side Air Bags........................................................... 179
Transporting Pets.................................................... 196
Air Bag Light ................................................................. 197
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 225
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 226
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 226
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 226
Air Conditioning ...............................................................36
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 40
, 226
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................40
Air Filter .........................................................................225
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................257
Alarm
Arm The System......................................................... 18
Disarm The System ................................................... 18
Security Alarm..................................................... 18
, 60
All Wheel Drive (AWD)..................................................... 76
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 7
Android Auto........................................................ 145
, 146
Android Auto™
b
......................................................145
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 229
, 271
Disposal ...................................................................230
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................158
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 61
Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 145
, 148
Apple CarPlay®
b
......................................................147
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................161
Audio Settings...............................................................132
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................106
Auto Down Power Windows............................................45
Auto Up Power Windows ................................................45
Automatic Climate Controls ........................................... 35
Automatic Door Locks .................................................... 21
Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 30
Automatic High Beams................................................... 30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 40
Automatic Transmission ....................................... 72
, 232
Adding Fluid....................................................232
, 272
Fluid And Filter Change........................................... 232
Fluid Change ........................................................... 232
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 232
Fluid Type .......................................................232
, 272
Special Additives.....................................................232
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 272
Axle Lubrication ............................................................272
B
Battery.................................................................... 59, 223
Charging System Light.............................................. 59
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 197
Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 162
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing............................139
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 226
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 254
Brake Assist System..................................................... 159
Brake Control System, Electronic................................ 159
Brake Fluid.................................................................... 272
Brake System ......................................................231
, 268
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................268
Fluid Check.............................................................. 272
Master Cylinder .......................................................231
Warning Light ............................................................ 58
Brightness, Interior Lights.............................................. 32
Bulbs, Light................................................................... 198
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
281
C
Camera, Rear ..................................................................95
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 271
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 222
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 230
Car Washes .................................................................. 266
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 199
Cargo Compartment .......................................................50
CD.................................................................................. 134
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 157
Certification Label...........................................................96
Chains, Tire................................................................... 263
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 251
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........67
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 196
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 196
Child Restraint.............................................................. 185
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 188
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 195
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 192
Infant And Child Restraints.................................... 187
LATCH Positions...................................................... 189
Locating The LATCH Anchorages........................... 191
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 189
Older Children And Child Restraints...................... 187
Seating Positions.................................................... 188
Cigar Lighter ....................................................................44
Clean Air Gasoline........................................................ 269
Cleaning
Wheels..................................................................... 262
Climate Control ...............................................................35
Clutch ............................................................................231
Fluid..........................................................................231
Cold Weather Operation................................................. 68
Compact Spare Tire......................................................261
Console............................................................................ 42
Floor ........................................................................... 42
Contract, Service ..........................................................275
Controls .........................................................................126
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................230
Cooling System .............................................................228
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................229
Coolant Level ...........................................................230
Cooling Capacity......................................................271
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................230
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................229
Inspection ...................................................... 229
, 230
Points To Remember...............................................230
Pressure Cap ...........................................................230
Radiator Cap............................................................230
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 229
, 271
Corrosion Protection.....................................................265
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................................79
Cruise Light .............................................................. 64
, 65
Customer Assistance....................................................273
Customer Programmable Features .............................106
Cybersecurity ................................................................106
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................................30
Defroster, Rear Window ................................................. 35
Defroster, Windshield...................................................197
De-Icer, Remote Start.....................................................17
Deleting A Phone ..........................................................140
Description
b
.............................................................204
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 66
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 30
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 223
Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 213
Disc Drive...................................................................... 134
Disconnecting...............................................................140
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 230
Disturb........................................................................... 142
Door Ajar ......................................................................... 59
Door Ajar Light................................................................ 59
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................................. 21
Dead Lock Device ..................................................... 21
Remote Keyless Entry............................................... 19
Drag & Drop..................................................................124
Driver Memory Presets ................................................131
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 23
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .................................................. 104
Dynamic Selector ........................................................... 76
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 159
Anti-Lock Brake System.......................................... 158
Traction Control System ......................................... 162
Electric Park Brake......................................................... 70
Electric Parking Brake.................................................... 70
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..................... 44
Electrical Power Outlets................................................. 44
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................160
11
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light......................60
Emergency Refueling................................................... 210
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 200
Jacking..................................................................... 200
Jump Starting.......................................................... 208
Overheating............................................................. 211
Towing ..................................................................... 213
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................67
Engine........................................................................... 222
Air Cleaner............................................................... 225
Break-In Recommendations .....................................69
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 223
Compartment.......................................................... 222
Coolant (Antifreeze)................................................ 271
Cooling..................................................................... 228
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 199
Fails To Start ..............................................................69
Flooded, Starting .......................................................69
Jump Starting.......................................................... 208
Oil.................................................................... 224
, 271
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 222
Oil Filter ................................................................... 225
Oil Selection ................................................... 224
, 271
Overheating............................................................. 211
Starting.......................................................................68
Engine Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
b
..................54
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .............182
, 215
Ethanol.......................................................................... 270
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 199
Exhaust System................................................... 199
, 228
Exterior Lighting ..............................................................29
Exterior Lights........................................................ 29
, 198
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................225
Air Conditioning ................................................40
, 226
Engine Oil.................................................................225
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................224
Flashers
Hazard Warning.......................................................200
Turn Signals...............................................31
, 65, 198
Flash-To-Pass .................................................................. 30
Flooded Engine Starting................................................. 69
Floor Console ..................................................................42
Fluid Capacities ............................................................271
Fluid Leaks....................................................................198
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil.................................................................223
Fluid, Brake...................................................................272
Fog Lights........................................................................ 31
Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 23
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................212
Front And Rear Park Assist System............................... 87
Fuel................................................................................269
Adding ........................................................................96
Additives...................................................................269
Clean Air...................................................................269
Ethanol.....................................................................270
Gasoline ...................................................................269
Gauge......................................................................... 62
Materials Added ......................................................269
Methanol..................................................................270
Octane Rating................................................ 269
, 271
Specifications ..........................................................271
Tank Capacity ..........................................................271
Full Brake Control System ........................................... 165
Fuses............................................................................. 233
G
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 269
Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................................... 269
Gasoline, Reformulated...............................................269
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................................ 62
Gear Selector Override.................................................211
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 267
Glove Compartment Storage ......................................... 42
Gross Axle Weight Rating........................................ 97
, 98
GVWR .............................................................................. 96
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water .................................... 104
Hazard Warning Flashers............................................. 200
Head Restraints.............................................................. 25
Headlights
Automatic .................................................................. 30
Cleaning................................................................... 266
Delay .......................................................................... 30
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 30
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 30
Passing ...................................................................... 30
Switch ........................................................................ 29
Time Delay................................................................. 30
Heated Mirrors ............................................................... 29
Heated Seats.................................................................. 25
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch........... 30
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 161
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
283
Hitches
Trailer Towing.............................................................99
Hood Prop........................................................................48
Hood Release ..................................................................48
I
Ignition.............................................................................15
Switch .........................................................................15
Instrument Cluster ..........................................................52
Display........................................................................53
Instrument Cluster
b
...................................................52
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 267
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 266
Interior Lights ..................................................................32
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)................................33
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................................43
J
Jack Location................................................................ 201
Jack Operation ............................................................. 202
Jacking And Tire Changing ¹........................................ 200
Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 202
Jump Starting ............................................................... 208
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm............................................................18
Disarm The Alarm ......................................................18
Keyless Entry..............................................................20
Remote Keyless Entry ...............................................12
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........13
Keyless Enter 'n Go™
Enter The Trunk .........................................................20
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ................................ 20
, 116
Passive Entry .............................................................20
Passive Entry Programming......................................20
Remote Control.......................................................... 20
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ................................. 20
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side.......................... 20
Keyless Entry................................................................... 12
Keys.................................................................................12
Replacement ............................................................. 14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals...................................... 31
Lane Change Assist ........................................................ 31
LaneSense ......................................................................92
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................172
Latches..........................................................................198
Hood........................................................................... 48
Leaks, Fluid...................................................................198
Life Of Tires ...................................................................259
Liftgate ............................................................................ 49
Closing........................................................................ 50
Opening...................................................................... 49
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer.....................................35
Light Bulbs ....................................................................198
Lighter
Cigar ........................................................................... 44
Lights.............................................................................198
Adaptive Cruise Control ............................................60
Air Bag......................................................................197
Audio System.............................................................61
Automatic Headlights................................................ 30
Brake Warning........................................................... 58
Coolant Temperature ................................................ 59
Cruise .................................................................. 64
, 65
Daytime Running.......................................................30
Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 30
Drive Mode ................................................................ 61
Electric Power Steering............................................. 60
Electronic Park Brake ............................................... 61
Electronic Stability Control ....................................... 61
Exterior.............................................................. 29
, 198
Exterior Bulb.............................................................. 64
External Light............................................................. 61
Fog ...................................................................... 31
, 64
Fuel Cutoff .......................................................... 62
, 64
Fuel Level .................................................................. 62
Full Brake Control ..................................................... 64
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................200
Headlight Switch ....................................................... 29
Headlights.................................................................. 29
Headlights On Reminder .......................................... 30
High Beam.......................................................... 30
, 65
Hood Open................................................................. 60
Icy Road Condition .................................................... 64
Immobilizer Fail......................................................... 64
Instrument Cluster .................................................... 29
Intensity Control........................................................ 32
Interior ....................................................................... 32
LaneSense................................................... 62
, 64, 65
Light Sensor .............................................................. 65
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 30
Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................................................ 62
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..................... 62
Park............................................................................ 64
Passing ...................................................................... 30
Seat Belt Reminder................................................... 60
Security Alarm ........................................................... 60
Service ....................................................................... 62
Service LaneSense ................................................... 62
Service Stop Start ..................................................... 63
11
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284
Speed .........................................................................65
StopStart Active .........................................................65
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)........................... 169
Transmission Fault ....................................................60
Transmission Temperature .......................................63
Trunk Open.................................................................60
Turn Signals .............................................. 31
, 65, 198
Vanity Mirror...............................................................28
Loading Vehicle...............................................................96
Tires ......................................................................... 254
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................................................19
Child Protection .........................................................21
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 169
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 226
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 268
M
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 223
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 216
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................62
Manual
Service..................................................................... 276
Manual Climate Controls................................................38
Master Cylinder
Brakes ..................................................................... 231
Media Mode ................................................................. 134
Methanol ...................................................................... 270
Mirrors .............................................................................28
Heated........................................................................29
Outside .......................................................................28
Vanity..........................................................................28
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle..........................................................................7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................169
Mopar Parts ..................................................................276
MP3 Control .................................................................... 43
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 69
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................171
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).......................... 269
, 271
Oil Change Indicator ....................................................... 54
Reset .......................................................................... 54
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................225
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................225
Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 60
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 224
, 271
Capacity ...................................................................271
Checking ..................................................................223
Dipstick ....................................................................223
Disposal ...................................................................224
Filter .........................................................................225
Filter Disposal..........................................................224
Identification Logo...................................................224
Materials Added To .................................................224
Pressure Warning Light.............................................60
Recommendation.......................................... 224
, 271
Viscosity ...................................................................271
Onboard Diagnostic System........................................... 66
Operating Precautions....................................................66
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.......................................................276
Outside Rearview Mirrors............................................... 28
Overheating, Engine .....................................................211
P
Paint Care ..................................................................... 265
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
b
.........................................................138
Park Assist ...................................................................... 87
Park Assist System, Front And Rear.............................. 87
Parking Brake ................................................................. 70
Personalized Main Menu Bar ......................................124
Pets ............................................................................... 196
Phone Mode .................................................................136
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................254
Power
Brakes...................................................................... 268
Mirrors ....................................................................... 29
Steering ..................................................................... 77
Power Folding Roof ........................................................ 46
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 175
Preparation For Jacking ...............................................201
Presets ..........................................................................131
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................................258
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .........................230
Radio
Presets..................................................................... 131
Radio Controls .............................................................. 126
Radio Mode .................................................................. 126
Radio Operation ..................................................126
, 157
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 125
Rain Sensitive Wiper System......................................... 34
Rear Camera................................................................... 95
Rear Cross Path............................................................164
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 23
Rear Window Defroster.................................................. 35
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
Rear Wiper/Washer ........................................................35
Recreational Towing .................................................... 103
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 269
Refrigerant.................................................................... 226
Release, Hood.................................................................48
Reminder, Lights On .......................................................30
Reminder, Seat Belt..................................................... 172
Remote Control
Starting System..........................................................16
Remote Keyless Entry.....................................................12
Arm The Alarm............................................................18
Disarm The Alarm ......................................................18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...................... 125
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........17
Uconnect Settings......................................................17
Remote Starting System.................................................16
Replacement Keys..........................................................14
Replacement Tires....................................................... 259
Reporting Safety Defects............................................. 276
Restraints, Child........................................................... 185
Restraints, Head .............................................................25
Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 7
Rotation, Tires .............................................................. 264
S
Safety............................................................................ 125
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................................... 197
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................................... 198
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 276
Safety Features ............................................................ 125
Safety Information, Tire ............................................... 250
Safety Tips .................................................................... 196
Safety, Exhaust Gas..................................................... 199
Satellite Radio...............................................................127
Saved Radio Stations ...................................................131
Schedule, Maintenance ...............................................216
Seat Belt Reminder ........................................................ 60
Seat Belts............................................................ 171
, 197
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..................175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..........175
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........................176
Child Restraints .......................................................185
Front Seat ............................................. 171
, 172, 174
Inspection ................................................................197
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................174
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................174
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................................172
Operating Instructions.............................................174
Pregnant Women.....................................................175
Rear Seat .................................................................172
Reminder .................................................................172
Untwisting Procedure..............................................174
Seat Belts Maintenance...............................................267
Seats................................................................................ 23
Adjustment................................................................. 23
Heated........................................................................25
Rear Folding............................................................... 23
Seatback Release ..................................................... 23
Tilting..........................................................................23
Security Alarm.......................................................... 18
, 60
Arm The System......................................................... 18
Disarm The System ................................................... 18
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).................................271
Semi-Auto Kit ................................................................204
Sentry Key Replacement................................................ 14
Service Assistance........................................................273
Service Contract ...........................................................275
Service Manuals...........................................................276
Settings .........................................................................106
Personal................................................................... 106
Settings, Audio.............................................................. 132
Shift Lever Override...................................................... 211
Shoulder Belts .............................................................. 172
Signals, Turn................................................... 31
, 65, 198
Sirius Satellite Radio.................................................... 127
Favorites .................................................................. 130
Replay ...................................................................... 129
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................130
Favorites .................................................................. 130
Replay ...................................................................... 129
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 263
Snow Tires ....................................................................260
Spare Tires................................................. 260
, 261, 262
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................................................ 271
Oil .............................................................................271
Speed Control
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ..................................... 80
Mode Setting (ACC Only)........................................... 80
Resume...................................................................... 80
Starting............................................................................ 68
Button ........................................................................ 15
Cold Weather............................................................. 68
Engine Fails To Start................................................. 69
Remote ...................................................................... 16
Starting And Operating................................................... 68
Starting Procedures ....................................................... 68
Steering
Tilt Column................................................................. 22
Wheel, Heated........................................................... 22
Wheel, Tilt.................................................................. 22
11
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................... 125
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System.................... 125
Stop/Start........................................................................77
Storage ............................................................................42
Storage, Vehicle ..............................................................40
Store Radio Presets ..................................................... 131
Storing Your Vehicle..................................................... 265
Stuck, Freeing .............................................................. 212
Sun Visor Extension ........................................................28
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ................. 178
Sway Control, Trailer .......................................................98
System, Remote Starting................................................16
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................22
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)..........................40
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................22
Time Delay
Headlight ....................................................................30
Tip Start ...........................................................................68
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 254
Tire Markings................................................................ 250
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
b
............ 169
Tire Safety Information ................................................ 250
Tire Service Kit ............................................................. 204
Tires......................................... 198
, 257, 260, 261, 264
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................................259
Air Pressure..............................................................257
Chains ......................................................................263
Changing ..................................................................200
Compact Spare........................................................261
General Information............................. 257
, 260, 261
High Speed ..............................................................258
Inflation Pressure ....................................................257
Life Of Tires..............................................................259
Load Capacity ..........................................................254
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..............63
, 169
Quality Grading ........................................................264
Radial .......................................................................258
Replacement ...........................................................259
Rotation....................................................................264
Safety ............................................................. 250
, 257
Sizes .........................................................................251
Snow Tires................................................................260
Spare Tires............................................ 260
, 261, 262
Spinning ...................................................................258
Trailer Towing ..........................................................101
Tread Wear Indicators.............................................259
Wheel Nut Torque....................................................268
To Open Hood ................................................................. 48
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight..................................... 100
Towing ............................................................................. 97
Disabled Vehicle...................................................... 213
Guide.......................................................................... 99
Recreational ............................................................103
Weight........................................................................ 99
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 103
Towing Eyes .................................................................. 213
Traction .........................................................................104
Traction Control............................................................162
Trailer Towing ................................................................. 97
Hitches....................................................................... 99
Minimum Requirements......................................... 100
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 100
Wiring....................................................................... 101
Trailer Towing Guide ...................................................... 99
Trailer Weight.................................................................. 99
Transfer Case
Fluid .........................................................................272
Transmission
Automatic .........................................................72
, 232
Fluid .........................................................................272
Transporting Pets .........................................................196
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................259
Turn Signals............................................................. 31
, 65
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
287
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ............................................... 141
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................................ 143
Uconnect Settings................................................... 106
Uconnect Phone.........................................137
, 138, 139
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress.................................. 142
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress............................ 142
Bluetooth Communication Link ............................. 145
Call Continuation .................................................... 143
Call Controls............................................................ 141
Call Termination...................................................... 143
Cancel Command ................................................... 138
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing............................ 139
Help Command ....................................................... 138
Join Calls ................................................................. 143
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 140
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ..................................................... 143
Managing Your Favorites ....................................... 141
Natural Speech ....................................................... 137
Operation................................................................. 137
Overview.................................................................. 136
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone ... 138
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..............139
Phonebook Download.............................................140
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................142
Power-Up..................................................................145
Recent Calls.............................................................142
Redial .......................................................................143
To Remove A Favorite .............................................141
Toggling Between Calls...........................................143
Touch-Tone Number Entry ......................................142
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..............143
Voice Command ......................................................143
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.............. 106
, 116
Passive Entry Programming....................................116
Uconnect System..........................................................122
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................264
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................174
USB..................................................................................43
V
Vanity Mirrors.................................................................. 28
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................268
Vehicle Loading......................................................96
, 254
Vehicle Maintenance....................................................224
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................... 7
Vehicle Storage...............................................................40
Voice Command........................................... 27
, 146, 148
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................................27
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................................ 200
Warnings, Roll Over...........................................................7
Warranty Information ...................................................275
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................................223
Washing Vehicle ........................................................... 266
Water
Driving Through.......................................................104
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................262
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.......................................... 262
Wind Buffeting................................................................ 46
Window Fogging ............................................................. 40
Windows.......................................................................... 45
Windshield Defroster ................................................... 197
Windshield Washers ...................................................... 33
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 226
Windshield Wiper De-Icer .............................................. 35
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 33
Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 226
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 33
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 34
Wrecker Towing ............................................................ 213
11
23_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd
yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the
use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
FIAT
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-888-242-6342 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1- 80 0 - 3 87-114 3 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum.
If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident
or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your FIAT
®
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOK
mopar.com/om
U. S.
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used under
license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition
23_FD_OM_EN_USC
2023 OWNER’S MANUAL
